دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung Manualsbridge camerasSAMSUNG ST5000

ﺔﻴﻔﻴﻛ ﻝﻮﺣ ﺔﻠﺼﻔﻣ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺗ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻦﻤﻀﺘﻳ

ﻼﻣﺎﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻰﺟﺮﻳ .ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ

ﺔﻌﺋﺎﺷ ﺔﻠﺌﺳﺃ

ﻊﻳﺮﺳ ﻊﺟﺮﻣ

ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺤﻤﻟﺍ

ﺔﻴﺳﺎﺳﻷﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻮﻟﺍ

ﺔﻣﺪﻘﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻮﻟﺍ

ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺘﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺭﺎﻴﺧ

ﺮﻳﺮﺤﺘﻟﺍ/ﺽﺮﻌﻟﺍ

ﻖﺣﻼﻣ

ﺱﺮﻬﻓ

ﻉﻮﺿﻮﻣ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺮﻘﻧﺍ



User Manual

ST5000

Summary of content (113 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 2
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ—ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪١‬ﻡ‪ ٣/‬ﻗﺪﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻐﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻭﺭﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫● ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Mac‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Corporation‬‬ ‫● ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪High‬‬ ‫‪ "– Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫] [‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ )ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ(‬ ‫) (‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ > ←‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪DUAL IS‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪D‬‬
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٤٣ .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٧٨ .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫● ‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ < ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪٣٠ e‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ( ‪٤٣ e‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٤٨ e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫● ‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ < ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٣٠ e‬‬ ‫● ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤٣ e‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ‪٤٤ e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫● ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪٥٨ e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪)
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪....
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً )‪................................................................. (EV‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪........................................................... (ACB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪....................................................
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫● ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫● ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻭ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٤‬‬
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDTM‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Samsung‬ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(١٧ .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[‪ .‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Language‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Time Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫● ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Date & Time‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻼ‬ ‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻵﺛﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺹ‪(٣٤ .‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٣٠ .‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪ :DUAL IS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺹ‪(٣٣ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٣٦ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪(٣٤ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ‪(٢٩ .‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ‪(٣٤ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪(.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪ OSD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) a‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ← ‪.a‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪(OIS‬‬ ‫‪Dvspa‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) > ← f‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.OIS‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺎً‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٢٥ .‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺹ‪(٣٣ .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ h‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺗﺪﻳًﺎ ﻣﻼﺑﺲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺹ‪(٤٣ .‬‬ ‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← s ← a‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫← ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺨﻔﻲ ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫← ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪٣‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪DUAL IS‬‬ ‫← ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪16.0‬‬ ‫‪8.0‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪4.0‬‬ ‫‪2.0‬‬ ‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.(AVC ،MPEG-4) H.264‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.p ← a‬‬ ‫● ‪ (MPEG-4 part 10/AVC) H.264‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ISO/IEC‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ← > ←‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫← ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‪(.
PAGE 37
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.D ← a‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫← ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) > ← f‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ( ←‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪(.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫‪DvdspaS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ :4320 X 3240‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A1‬‬ ‫‪ :4000 X 3000‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.A1‬‬ ‫‪ :3984 X 2656‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪ A2‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ v‬ﻭ ‪ ،D‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪← f‬‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1280 X 720 HQ‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← > ← f‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪(. ← f‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ :1280 X 720 HQ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪DvdspaS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫● ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﺡ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪spa‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻻﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪spaS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء*‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻞء‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪Dvdpa‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪Dvdpa‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫← ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟ ًﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫← ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻤﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺗﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭ " ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٤‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫‪ ١٤‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﻫﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫←‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← > ← f‬‬ ‫← ‪(.‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٦٥‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً )‪(EV‬‬ ‫‪Dvdp‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻤﻖ )‪(-‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪(٠‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻄﻊ )‪(+‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﻪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(ACB‬‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳ ًﻨﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(ACB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫● ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ ACB‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.a‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪Dvdp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪Dvdp‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪← f‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) > ← f‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭ‪ ACB‬ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ VGA‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪vdspa‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻃﺎً ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) > ← f‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ←‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) > ← f‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) > ← f‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+2‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+1‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ < ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ* )‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺹ‪(٧٠ .‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪(.
PAGE 66
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺹ‪/٧١ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺹ‪(٧٢ .‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪) .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺷﺨﺺ(‬ ‫← ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺃﺩﺭ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ← ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ← ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ← ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ← ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫← ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ← ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ← ﻧﻌﻢ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ–ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ← .‬ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ← ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ←‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ )‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫← ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻃﺎً ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫← ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٥‬‬ ‫←‬ ‫←‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫← ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٧٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(ACB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫← ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ←‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.DPOF 1.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪← M‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) .‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ← ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٩٤ .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪HDTV‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ HDTV‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪.HDTV‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪← M‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪← M‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) .
PAGE 85
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Intelli-studio‬‬ ‫‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Flickr‬ﺃﻭ ‪.YouTube‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Help ← Help‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Install Intelli-studio on PC ← Tool‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ → ‪My Computer → Removable Disk‬‬ ‫‪.DCIM → 100PHOTO‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows Vista/7‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Mac‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS 10.4‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪← M‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) .‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ← ‪ ← USB‬ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ > ﺃﻭ < ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٧‬ﻭ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.M‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ,‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*(‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(3 ،2 ،*1 ،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪) .
PAGE 95
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ‪ s‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ*‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Intelli-studio‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .
PAGE 97
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٩٣ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.microSDTM‬‬ ‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ .DCF‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٩٣ .
PAGE 98
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻘﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDTM‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSDTM‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ‪ a‬ﻭﺿﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻭﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ,‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻘﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬ ‫● ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٩٣ .
PAGE 104
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍً‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺹ‪(٩٣ .
PAGE 105
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.intelli-studio‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٨٤ .‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ intelli-studio‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ intelli-studio‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ intelli-studio‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺮﺗﻮﻴﺒﻤﻛ ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺗ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(٩٥ .
PAGE 106
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ ٧٫٧٦) "٢٫٣/١‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً( ‪CCD‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ١٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ٣٩٫٢ - ٥٫٦ = Schneider-KREUZNACH f‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻴﻒ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ٢١٧ - ٣١ :‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪F-stop‬‬ ‫)‪F5.5 (T) - F3.3 (W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪1.0X - 7.0X :‬‬ ‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) 1.0X - 13.
PAGE 107
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،H‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،L‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫● ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬
PAGE 108
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،DPOF 1.1 ،EXIF 2.21 ،JPEG (DCF) :‬‬ ‫‪PictBridge 1.0‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪(AVC ،MPEG-4) H.264:‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪WAV :‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSDTM‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ١١٣٠ ،SLB-11A‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ(‬ ‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٩٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٤٨‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ‪٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪٩٨‬‬ ‫‪٩٨ microSD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٣٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪٥٨ (AEB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪
PAGE 111
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪٩٢ ,٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٩٤‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٤٤ ISO‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ‪٦٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪٩٣‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٩٦‬‬ ‫ﺹ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٩٢ AF‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪٩٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪٨٦‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪٧٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻞء ‪٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐ
PAGE 112
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺠﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ACB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪٥١‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٤‬‬ ‫‪٩٤ +Anynet‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢٢‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪٧٨ DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٣٣ Dual IS‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٣٤‬‬ ‫‪٨١ HDTV‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٤‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪٨٤ Intelli-studio‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ‪١١١‬‬
PAGE 113
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪http://www.samsungimaging.com/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪.